X3 xDrive28i
X3 xDrive35i
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
© 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English XI/10, 12 10 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 252.
Using this Owner's Manual
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
19 iDrive
25 Voice activation system
27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
32 Opening and closing
47 Adjusting
55 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
67 Displays
76 Lamps
80 Safety
86 Driving stability control systems
91 Driving comfort
101 Climate control
107 Interior equipment
114 Storage compartments
Driving tips
120 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
128 Navigation
Entertainment
146 Tone
148 Radio
155 CD/multimedia
Communication
176 Professional mobile phone preparation
package
185 Office
193 Contacts
195 BMW Assist
Mobility
204 Refueling
206 Fuel
207 Wheels and tires
215 Engine compartment
217 Engine oil
219 Maintenance
221 Replacing components
228 Breakdown assistance
233 Care
Reference
238 Technical data
243 Short commands of the voice activation
system
252 Everything from A to Z
Seite 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific
equipment and optional accessories, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Your individual vehicle
You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi‐
vidualized equipment and features.
This Owner's Manual describes the entire array
of options and equipment available for a specific
model.
As a result, the manual may contain accessories
and equipment that you may not have specified
for your own vehicle.
All options and special equipment are marked
with an asterisk *.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
tions.
Status at publication
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
Seite 6
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Notes
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Seite 7
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 8
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Notes
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Cockpit
All around the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 44
2 Power windows 43
3 Exterior mirror operation 53
4 Lamps
Front fog lamps* 79
Parking lamps 76
Low beams 76
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol* 77
Daytime running lights* 77
Adaptive light control* 77
High-beam Assistant* 78
Instrument lighting 79
5 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 61
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 61
High-beam Assistant* 78
Roadside parking lamps 77
Computer* 70
6 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed* 91
Resume speed 92
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 91
Seite 12
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Cockpit
7 Instrument cluster 13
8 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation* 25
Telephone* 176
9 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 62
Rain sensor* 63
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps* 63
Rear window wiper 63
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 58
11 Horn
12 Steering wheel heating* 54
13 Adjust the steering wheel 54
14 Open the tailgate* 39
15 Unlocking the hood
Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 67
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps
4 Tachometer 68
5 Engine oil temperature 68
6 Electronic displays 15
Seite 13
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
7 External temperature 69 Time 69
8 Miles, trip miles 68
9 Reset miles 68
Indicator/warning lamps
Instrument cluster
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐
nition is switched on, and light up briefly in the
process.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Parking brake
Automatic Hold*
Front fog lamps*
High beams
Symbol Function or system
High-beam Assistant*
Parking lamps, headlamp control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Tire Pressure Monitor*
Safety belts
Airbag system
Steering system
Emissions
Brake system
Brake system in Canadian models
Antilock Brake System ABS
Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana‐
dian models
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
Seite 14
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Cockpit
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information on the Control Display,
e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐
quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐
trol, refer to page 74.
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐
matically.
Instrument cluster, electronic displays
With the Professional navigation system
1 Selection list, e.g., radio 69
Navigation display 128
Computer 70
2 Transmission displays 66
3 Service requirements 73
Messages, e.g., warnings 14
Seite 15
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
With the Business navigation system or no navigation
1 Clock, external temperature 69
2 Symbols, e.g., Check Control 74
3 Transmission displays 66
4 Program display, e.g., Dynamic Driving Con‐
trol*
5 Computer 70
6 Test messages, e.g., Service display 73
Seite 16
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Headliner 18
2 Control Display 19
3 Glove compartment 114
4 Air vent 106
5 Hazard warning system 228
Central locking system 35
6 Radio 148
CD/multimedia 155
7 Automatic climate control 101
8 Controller with buttons 19
9 Parking brake 59
Auto Hold* 60
10 PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol* 93
Backup camera* 95
Top View* 97
HDC Hill Descent Control 87
11 Dynamic Driving Control* 89
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 86
12 Transmission selector lever
Seite 17
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
iDrive
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
Seite 19
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation map
view.
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
Seite 20
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
iDrive
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
Seite 21
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta‐
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Traffic bulletins* switched on.
HD Radio™* is switched on.
Satellite radio* switched on
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call*
Missed call*
Wireless network reception
strength* Symbol flashes: searching
for network
Wireless network is not available*
Bluetooth* is switched on.
Roaming* is active
Text message* was received.
Check the SIM card*.
SIM card* is blocked.
SIM card* is missing.
Enter the PIN*.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player*
Music collection*
Gracenote® database*
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Seite 22
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
iDrive
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions* are switched
off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion*.
Split screen*
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐
ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Seite 23
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters:
Symbol Function
Move the controller up: switch
from upper to lower case letters.
Move the controller up: switch
from lower to upper case letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.
Seite 24
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
iDrive
Voice activation system*
The concept
▷ The voice activation system can be used to
operate functions by means of spoken com‐
mands.
▷ Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands. The system
prompts you to make your entries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Set the language, refer to page 73.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, continue
operating the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis‐
play.
To have the available commands read out
loud: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Help on the voice activation system
To have the information in the help system read
out loud: ›Help‹
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, irrespec‐
tive of which menu item is currently selected,
e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 243.
Example: playing back a CD
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
Seite 25
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
5. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
page 228, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐
mon pronunciation of the station name.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof* closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 26
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Voice activation system
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Owner's Manual in the vehicle
The Owner's Manual can be displayed on the
Control Display in accordance with the equip‐
ment selected.
Methods of opening the Owner's
Manual
The following methods are available:
▷ Quick reference: "Quick reference"
▷ Key word search: "Owner's Manual"
▷ Using pictures: "Search by pictures"
1. Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Select "Quick reference", "Search by
pictures" or "Owner's Manual".
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Context-sensitive help - section of the
Owner's Manual referring to the
present function
The relevant information can be opened directly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1.
Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to the
function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
Seite 27
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored and opened
directly on the Programmable memory buttons.
Storing
1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 28
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the tailgate
4 Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, refer to
Personal Profile.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control.
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐
trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the driver's door lock.
Replacing the battery
1.
Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Seite 32
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the
engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote
control by external sources.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine in case of
emergency detection of remote control
If a corresponding Check Control message ap‐
pears, hold the remote control, as shown,
against the marked area on the steering column
and press the Start/Stop button within 10 sec‐
onds while pressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
Personal Profile concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷ When the vehicle is unlocked, the profile that
was last detected and called up with the re‐
mote control is used.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three Per‐
sonal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function. For more information, contact your
service center.
Transmission takes place via:
▷ The USB interface in the glove compart‐
ment onto a USB device.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the one
associated with the remote control currently in
use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The profile that is opened is assigned to the re‐
mote control currently in use.
Renaming profiles
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
Seite 33
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. USB interface*, refer to page 114: "USB
device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the saved
contacts can be exported.
This can be useful for storing and opening per‐
sonal settings, for instance if settings are acci‐
dentally changed or deleted.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface*, refer to page 114: "USB
device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individual
settings without affecting the three Personal
Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. The current profile is selected.
4. Open "Guest".
5. Create the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Exterior mirror position*, refer to page 53.
▷ CD/Multimedia*, refer to page 155: the au‐
dio source listened to last.
▷ Dynamic Driving Control*, refer to
page 89: sport program.
Seite 34
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
▷ Driver's seat position, refer to page 37: au‐
tomatically retrieved after unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 23: assignment.
▷ Head-up Display*, refer to page 99: selec‐
tion, brightness and position of the display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 76: time setting.
▷ Tone, refer to page 146: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐
mate control with enhanced features*, refer
to page 101: settings.
▷ Navigation*, refer to page 128: map views,
route criteria, voice output on/off.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control*: adjusting the
volume of the signal tone, refer to
page 93.
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings, refer to page 148.
▷ Backup camera*, refer to page 95: selec‐
tion of functions and type of display.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer to
page 73.
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 62.
▷ Daytime running lights*, refer to page 77:
current setting.
▷ Locking the vehicle, refer to page 36: after
a brief period or after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the driver's door lock*.
▷ Via the door handles of the driver's and front
passenger doors*.
▷ Via the button on the tailgate*.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on/off.
Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock
buttons or the door opener.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps* are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system*, refer to page 42, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Seite 35
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Opening and closing: from the
outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button.
The vehicle is unlocked.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof*.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows and the glass sunroof* open.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Do not lock from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps,
courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration can be set.
Opening the tailgate
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it was
previously locked or unlocked.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Seite 36
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
In some vehicle equipment variants, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo area.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Activating the setting
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery may
be discharged or there may be interference from
external sources such as mobile phones, metal
objects, overhead power lines, transmission
towers, etc.
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the
door lock using the key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Seite 37
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Do not lock from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
key.◀
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system* is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via
the door lock.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock
the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the
driver's door.
Locking the doors and tailgate at once*
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be locked via the door lock.
To lock all doors and the tailgate at once:
1.
With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
the button for the central locking system in
the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Unlocking and opening*
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Locking and unlocking
Press the button in the vehicle.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or
unlocked when the front doors are closed, but
they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
Seite 38
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Tailgate
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Opening from the outside
▷ Press the button next to the tailgate.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second and re‐
lease.
Opening from the inside*
Push the button* in the driver's foot‐
well.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is stationary,
provided that the tailgate has not been locked.
Closing
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control may be locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.◀
Locking the vehicle*
Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.
Seite 39
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The vehicle is locked completely.
Automatic trunk lid operation*
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
Adjusting the opening height
When adjusting the opening height, en‐
sure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/
10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling
may not be high enough for the open tailgate if
the load situation changes.◀
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired opening
height is selected.
Opening
The tailgate opens fully.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control or in the driver's footwell.
Pressing the button again stops the motion.
The opening process is interrupted as well:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.
The tailgate closes automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the tailgate.
The tailgate closes automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
▷ Press the button, arrow 2.
Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐
cle is locked.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Seite 40
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
The closing process is not interrupted when the
vehicle starts moving.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control may be locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.◀
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate
the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and
smooth motion.
Comfort Access*
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access.
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow 1. This cor‐
responds to pressing the button.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
hold.
The windows and the glass sunroof* close as
well.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
Seite 41
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control may be locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.◀
Ignition on
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on.
When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal;
otherwise, the engine will start.
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sources
such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead
power lines, transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use a key in the
door lock.
To subsequently start the engine, hold the re‐
mote control against the marked area on the
steering column, refer to page 33.
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 43.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock*, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some country-specific versions.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again by the alarm system. The hazard
warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode*
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the
remote control with you, pull on the door
handle.
Seite 42
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
continuously. The interior motion sensor is
not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine is started, but no longer than
approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In automatic car washes
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
twice in succession.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then flashes continuously.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Closing
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
Seite 43
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with Com‐
fort Access*.
Pinch protection
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from
opening and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
Switching on and off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure, it may only be possible to
operate the windows to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there until the window is closed.
Roller sunblinds*
Roller sunblinds for the rear side
windows
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
it onto the bracket.
Do not open the window while the roller
sunblind is raised.
Do not open the window while the roller sunblind
is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of damage at
high speeds that may result in personal injury.◀
Seite 44
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
Panoramic glass sunroof*
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the same
switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press the switch briefly.
▷ The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷ The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The
sliding visor stays completely
open.
Pressing the switch again
closes the sliding visor al‐
most completely.
Opening/closing the sliding visor
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐
scribed under Sliding visor.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Press the switch twice in the de‐
sired direction past the resist‐
ance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with Com‐
fort Access*.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open.
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐
partment.
Every time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
completely, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the movement by pressing the
switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Seite 45
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure, it may only be possible to
operate the roof to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press and hold the switch until
the initialization has been com‐
pleted:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the sunroof and sliding
visor are completely closed.
▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 46
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Opening and closing
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 50.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 51.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 80.
Seats
Adjusting
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving.
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀
The seat setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked
via the remote control, the position is automati‐
cally retrieved if the setting, refer to page 37, for
this function is active.
Overview: manually adjustable seats
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support*
3 Seat tilt*
4 Backrest width*
5 Lumbar support*
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Settings in detail: manually adjustable
seats
Forward/back:
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Seite 47
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Seat tilt*:
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en‐
gages properly.
Height:
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt:
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Overview: electrically* adjustable
seats
1 Backrest width
2 Lumbar support*
3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
4 Backrest tilt
5 Seat and mirror memory for driver's seat
Settings in detail: electrically*
adjustable seats
1.
Forward/back.
2. Height.
Seite 48
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Adjusting
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support*
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch.
The curvature is increased/decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Backrest width*
Change the width of the backrest using the side
wings to adjust the lateral support.
Front seat heating*
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Seite 49
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seat heating*
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Number of safety belts
Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety belts
for the safety of you and your passengers. How‐
ever, they can only offer protection when ad‐
justed correctly.
Notes
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for passen‐
gers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solely in‐
tended for the center passenger.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
belt buckle.
Seite 50
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Adjusting
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and
front passenger seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Seite 51
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Adjusting the height: outer head
restraints
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos‐
sible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Seat and mirror memory*
General information
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions can be stored and retrieved for each
remote control. Settings for the backrest width
and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat
or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Seite 52
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Adjusting
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor*
3 Fold in and out*
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
The mirror setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is au‐
tomatically retrieved if the setting for this
function is active.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions*
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 52
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor*
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1.
Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out*
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
Seite 53
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature*
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating*
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 54
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of the
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐
jury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐
tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 81.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Before mounting
Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 81.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.
Seite 55
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Backrest width*
Before installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width completely. Do not change the backrest
width again and do not call up a memory posi‐
tion.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
straint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated in the gap between the seat and backrest.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Seite 56
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Transporting children safely
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
There are three mounting points for the upper
retaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixing
systems.
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
not properly secure the child restraint fixing sys‐
tem in an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Raise the head restraint.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the
mounting eyes.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
5. Lower the head restraint.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to
page 44.
Seite 57
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Driving
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake
pedal is pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button and do not press on
the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams
are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ If the engine is switched off and the ignition
is switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off
or the daytime running lights are switched
on.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system, the ignition switches off auto‐
matically.
Radio ready state
This state can only be reached by pressing the
Start/Stop button briefly to switch off the engine
while it is running.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
Radio ready state switches off automatically:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
set the parking brake and place the transmission
in position P or neutral to prevent the car from
moving.◀
Seite 58
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving
Frequent starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
the danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐
erate engine speeds.
Automatic transmission*
Starting the engine
Press on the brake pedal and
press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automat‐
ically for a brief period and is
stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the windows and injure them‐
selves.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
Automatic transmission*
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll when the following
steps are adhered to:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake or deactivate Au‐
tomatic Hold.
4. Switch the engine off.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes if the vehicle is not
moved.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
In cars with automatic transmission*:
The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐
matically:
▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.
▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold.
Seite 59
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up in red. The
parking brake is set.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking;
otherwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep
upward and downward inclines, further secure
the vehicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀
While driving
Use while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lamps light up.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake
remains set.
Releasing
Automatic transmission*: Press the
switch while the brake is pressed or trans‐
mission position P is engaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Automatic Hold*
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold
is automatically deactivated and the parking
brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp switches from green
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving away:
▷ Release the parking brake manually.
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold.
Seite 60
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
This function can be activated when the driver's
door is closed and the safety belt is fastened, or
while driving.
Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake, refer to page 59, is set
manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐
matically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling when it stops.
The indicator lamp lights up in green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving into a car wash
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the engine
is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
it.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Seite 61
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
damaged.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Seite 62
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor*
The concept
The time between wipes is controlled automat‐
ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
Press the button on the wiper lever.
When activated, the wipers move over the wind‐
shield once.
The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀
Rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps*
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated*
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Switching on the rear window wiper
Press the lever forward: intermittent wipe. When
reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to
continuous operation.
Seite 63
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
To clean the rear window, press the lever further
forward.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
it away from sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
ommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Capacity
Approx. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 58, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
Seite 64
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving
▷ After the engine is switched off, if the car is
in radio ready state, refer to page 58, or if the
ignition is switched off, refer to page 58, and
if position R or D is engaged.
▷ If the ignition is switched off and position N
is engaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv‐
ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Press the Unlock button to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Seite 65
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Activating the M/S manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Sport automatic
transmission*
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans‐
mission temporarily switches to manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the system
switches back into automatic mode if the selec‐
tor lever is in D.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, for instance, P.
Seite 66
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving
Displays
Instrument cluster
At a glance
1 Fuel gauge
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps
4 Tachometer
5 Oil temperature
6 Electronic displays
7 External temperature, clock
8 Miles, trip miles
9 Reset miles
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to
page 204.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the computer.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/
50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.◀
Seite 67
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Displaying the cruising range
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted
to protect the engine.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driving
in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consumption
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle is converted to electrical en‐
ergy while coasting. The vehicle
battery is partially charged and
fuel consumption can be low‐
ered.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. A Check Control message is
displayed in addition.
Odometer and trip odometer
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Seite 68
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Displays
Resetting the trip odometer
Press the knob.
▷ The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched
off.
▷ When the ignition is switched
on, the trip odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/
+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is the increased danger of
ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be operated using the buttons
and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel and
the display in the instrument cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone*.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system*.
Activating a list and creating the
setting
Press a button on the right side of the steering
wheel or turn the thumbwheel to activate the re‐
quired list.
Create the setting using the thumbwheel.
Seite 69
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Computer
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever succes‐
sively calls up different pieces of
information on the Info Display.
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Time.
▷ Time of arrival*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the com‐
puter is to be displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine stopped do not enter into the calculation.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Distance to destination*
The distance remaining to the destination is dis‐
played if a destination is entered in the naviga‐
tion system* before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Seite 70
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Displays
Time of arrival*
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system*
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/
5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Resetting values
The average fuel consumption and average
speed can be reset.
Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Trip computer
There are two types of computer.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an over‐
view of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Seite 71
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Cons." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone*
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
Seite 72
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Displays
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance and temperature:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Service requirements
Display
The driving distance or the time to the next serv‐
ice is displayed briefly after the ignition is
switched on.
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service spe‐
cialist.
Seite 73
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re‐
quest, refer to page 195.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching. Please make a
service appointment.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Create the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request*
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display*.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Seite 74
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Displays
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Addition information, such as on the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control. The supplementary text of ur‐
gent messages is displayed automatically.
It is shown on the Control Display.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis‐
played again after the ignition is switched off.
Seite 75
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Lamps
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps*
2 Front fog lamps*
3 Automatic headlamp control/adaptive light
control*/High-beam Assistant*/welcome
lamps*/daytime running lights
4 Lamps off/daytime running lights*
5 Parking lamps/daytime running lights*
6 Low beams/welcome lamps/High-beam As‐
sistant*
7 Instrument lighting
8 Headlamp range control*
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 77.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position
or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
Seite 76
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Lamps
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights*
The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
tion 0, and . After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Adaptive light control*
The concept
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
Controls
Activating
Switch position
with the ignition switched
on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
Seite 77
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive
light control directs light towards the front pas‐
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
High-beam Assistant*
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor
on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The
assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1.
Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati‐
cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
Seite 78
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Lamps
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior
rearview mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 77, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust the
brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: press the button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
Seite 79
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Seite 80
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Safety
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
ments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions
under Children on the front passenger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically recommended by
the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Seite 81
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
senger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the
position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
damage to objects.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset when the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use
wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the
system will operate properly. Reset the system
after each correction of the tire inflation pres‐
sure and after every tire or wheel change.
Seite 82
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Safety
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐
ics.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset TPM"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
setting process is completed automatically dur‐
ing driving. The tires are shown in green and
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically.
If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are
displayed in yellow.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires* or run-flat tires*.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires*
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire on the damaged wheel.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at
Seite 83
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
the next opportunity and have them re‐
placed if necessary.
Run-flat tires*
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/
80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Message when the system was not
reset
A Check Control message is displayed.
The system detected a wheel change
but was not reset.
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
pressure are not reliable.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. A flat tire
cannot be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
tem again.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the disturbance, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
Seite 84
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Safety
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating prop‐
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then re‐
main continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Brake force display*
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 85
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Driving stability control systems
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
Seite 86
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving stability control systems
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Performance Control*
Performance Control enhances the agility of
your vehicle.
To enhance performance during sporty driving,
the rear wheel on the inside of the curve is
braked while the resulting braking effect is
largely compensated by engine intervention.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐
hill gradients. Without requiring brake applica‐
tion, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
twice walking speed.
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. twice walking speed and then keeps
its speed constant.
While you are actively braking, the system is on
standby. The system does not brake the vehicle
during this time.
Use HDC in low gears or in transmission position
D or R only.
Changing the speed
The speed can be changed in the range from
roughly twice walking speed to approx. 15 mph/
25 km/h by lightly pressing the accelerator.
To set the speed: buttons* on the
steering wheel
The desired speed can be specified in the range
from roughly twice walking speed to approx.
15 mph/25 km/h using the rocker switch of the
cruise control on the steering wheel.
Seite 87
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ Press up the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point of
resistance: the speed increases while the
rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press down the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed decreases gradually.
▷ Press down the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: when driving forward, the
speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h;
when reversing, the speed decreases to ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the but‐
ton lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display
The selected speed is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Dynamic Damping Control*
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
ing Control, refer to page 89.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
NORMAL
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Variable sport steering*
The variable sport steering is designed for
sporty driving.
It increases the steering angle of the front
wheels at large steering wheel angles, e.g., in
tight curves or when parking. Steering becomes
more direct.
Seite 88
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving stability control systems
It also varies the steering force required to turn
the wheels in accordance with the vehicle
speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In ad‐
dition, it becomes easier to steer during parking
and maneuvering.
Dynamic Driving Control*
The concept
Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust
the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro‐
grams are available for this purpose; they can be
activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control
buttons.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
NORMAL
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to NORMAL
in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 86, is active, driv‐
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in bends.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has max‐
imum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control, refer to page 87, is ac‐
tivated. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in bends.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension during limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the instrument
cluster and the DSC indicator lamp lights up.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for
greater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press the button. SPORT+ is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 90, the sport program
can be set to individual specifications.
After the sport program is activated, select
"Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed
panel and configure the program.
Optionally, the sport program can be configured
before it is activated:
1.
"Settings"
Seite 89
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. "SPORT mode"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when the sport
program is activated.
NORMAL
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
Activating NORMAL
Press the button. NORMAL is activated
when the program display disappears
in the instrument cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 89.
Displays
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list
of the selectable programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Display driving settings"
Seite 90
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving stability control systems
Driving comfort
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
Controls
Buttons at a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
4 Store, maintain/change speed
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ HDC is activated.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the button.
Seite 91
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 92.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Change, maintain speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while inter‐
rupted to maintain and store the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/
1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure
on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is
released, the vehicle maintains its final
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re‐
sistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display of desired speed
2 Indicator lamp
3 Brief status display
Desired speed
Display in the speedometer:
▷ The marking lights up in
green: the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up in or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Seite 92
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving comfort
Brief status display
Brief display in the speedometer:
Selected desired speed
If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad‐
equate to operate the system.
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera*, refer to page 95, can be
switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or behind
your vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/
1.50 m.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
Seite 93
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐
ing forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 147.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1.
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Zoom view
On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle
is shown enlarged.
▷ Forward gear or transmission position D en‐
gaged: front area of the vehicle.
▷ Reverse gear or transmission position R en‐
gaged: rear area of the vehicle.
Seite 94
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving comfort
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Malfunction
A Check Control message, refer to page 74, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
On the Control Display, the areas in front of and
behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed.
Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Backup camera*
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in park‐
ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐
hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷ After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷ Above approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when driving
forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer
to page 97.
Seite 95
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Assistance functions
Functional requirement
▷ The backup camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Pathway lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image
when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 97.
Turning circle lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image.
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 97.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Seite 96
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving comfort
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With the backup camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the backup camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 235.
Top View*
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneuver‐
ing. The area around the doors and the road area
around the vehicle are shown on the Control
Display for this purpose.
Capturing the image
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
terior mirrors are detected early.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Seite 97
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐
ing forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 98.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to Top
View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via
iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Seite 98
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving comfort
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you
in assessing the amount of space actually
needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
Cameras
The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 235.
Head-up Display*
The concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Head-up display"
Switch the Head-up Display ON/OFF as re‐
quired.
Display
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
Seite 99
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The brightness is adjusted.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting,
refer to page 79.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adjusting the height
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.
Seite 100
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving comfort
Climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Vent settings
2 Air volume
3 AUTO program
4 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
5 Recirculated-air mode
6 Temperature
7 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
8 Cooling function
9 Rear window defroster
10 Seat heating* 49
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Footwell.
The programs can be combined as necessary.
Air volume, manual
Turn the wheel to set the desired
air volume.
The higher the rate, the more ef‐
fective the heating or cooling will
be.
The air volume of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Seite 101
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Air volume, air distribution, and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and into
the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 102, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of
outside air into the vehicle is permanently
blocked.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air volume,
if necessary.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
If the windows fog over, also switch on the cool‐
ing function.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and
– depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 122, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Turn the rotary switch for the air volume, refer to
page 101, to 0. The blower and automatic cli‐
mate control are switched off entirely.
Switching on
Set any air volume.
The AUTO program can also be switched on di‐
rectly via the AUTO button.
Seite 102
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Climate control
Microfilter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance of your vehicle.
More information can be found in the service re‐
quirements display, refer to page 73.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features*
1 Vent settings
2 Temperature, left
3 Maximum cooling
4 AUTO program
5 Air volume, AUTO intensity
6 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
7 Display
8 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
9 ALL program
10 Temperature, right
11 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
12 Cooling function
13 Rear window defroster
14 Seat heating* 49
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Footwell.
Seite 103
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The programs can be combined as necessary.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 105, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
The air volume of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and controls the shut-off automati‐
cally.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Seite 104
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Climate control
If the windows are fogged over, switch off
the recirculated-air mode and press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
ALL program
Press the button.
The current setting or later settings of
the temperature on the driver's side are trans‐
ferred to the front passenger side.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side are changed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
If the windows are fogged over, additionally
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and
– depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 122, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press the left button at the minimum
speed.
Switching on
Press any button, except for the buttons for the
ALL program or rear window heating.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter,
recirculated-air filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
The recirculated-air filter removes dust from the
interior air in recirculated-air mode.
These filters should be replaced during sched‐
uled maintenance of your vehicle.
More information can be found in the service re‐
quirements display, refer to page 73.
Seite 105
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel* to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from
the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in the rear*
▷ Thumbwheel for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 3.
Parked-car ventilation*
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle
interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by using
two preset switch-on times. It remains switched
on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 106
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Climate control
Interior equipment
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
This system can replace up to three different
hand-held transmitters for various types of re‐
mote-controlled equipment, such as garage
doors or lighting systems.
The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro‐
grammed on one of the three memory buttons.
The corresponding device can then be operated
using the programmed memory button.
The LED indicates that a signal is being trans‐
mitted.
When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro‐
grams for security reasons.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the universal remote control,
ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob‐
jects in the range of movement of the remote-
controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of
injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the instructions of the hand-held
transmitter, the remote-controlled de‐
vice is generally compatible with the universal
remote control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Programming
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Memory buttons, arrow 2.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes.
All programs of the three memory buttons,
arrow 2, are cleared.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of
approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory
buttons.
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of
the hand-held transmitter and the memory
button of the universal remote control.
The LED flashes slowly.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
The device can be operated using the memory
button with the engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Malfunction
If the device cannot be used after repeated at‐
tempts at programming, please check whether
the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an
alternating code system.
Seite 107
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
To do so:
▷ Read the instructions of the hand-held
transmitter.
▷ Press the memory button of the universal
remote control for an extended period.
If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and
then lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec‐
onds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped
with an alternating code system.
In this case, program the memory buttons as
described under Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters.
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
Please obtain information on synchronizing the
device in the operating manual of the device be‐
ing set up.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled device.
2. Program the universal remote control as de‐
scribed above under Fixed-code hand-held
transmitters.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec‐
onds until the device to be adjusted is acti‐
vated.
If the device does not become activated,
press and hold the button and watch the
LED:
▷ If the LED lights up continuously, the
programming is completed. The device
should become activated when the but‐
ton is pressed briefly.
▷ If the LED flashes for approx. 2 seconds
and then lights up continuously, con‐
tinue the programming procedure be‐
ginning with step 4.
4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.
5. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds
for the next step.
6. Press the programmed memory button of
the universal remote control three times.
The device can be operated when the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of
approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory
buttons.
3. Press the memory button of the universal
remote control.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly.
All stored programs are deleted.
The programs cannot be deleted individually.
Lighter*
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Seite 108
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Interior equipment
The cigarette lighter is located in the center con‐
sole.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical devices
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used for electrical de‐
vices up to approx. 200 watts with 12 volts with
the engine running or the ignition switched on.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Front center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
Center armrest
Remove the cover.
Rear center console*
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area.
Seite 109
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
In the storage compartment below the
cargo area floor*
The socket is located in the storage compart‐
ment under the cargo area floor.
Remove the cover.
Cargo area
Trunk cover
Pull out the trunk cover and hook it into the hold‐
ers.
Do not stow heavy objects
Only stow light objects in the compart‐
ments; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Do not let the trunk cover snap back into
place
Do not allow the trunk cover to snap back into
place; this can damage it.◀
Removing and inserting
Trunk cover without partition net:
Removing
To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐
moved.
Reach under the cover and push it up. Pull the
cover back horizontally.
Trunk cover with partition net:
Removing
To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐
moved.
1.
Press the button, arrow 1, to unlock the
cover.
2. Pull the cover back, arrow 2.
Installing
Push the cover back horizontally until it engages
audibly.
Enlarging the cargo area
General information
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat backr‐
ests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in the area of movement and that
Seite 110
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Interior equipment
no one reaches into the area of movement of the
rear seat backrests when the middle section is
folded down. Otherwise, injury or damage may
result.◀
Locking the backrest
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, the restraining effect of the
safety belts may be limited in an accident.◀
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. The red warning
field in the control display disappears. If it is not
properly engaged, transported cargo could en‐
ter the passenger compartment during braking
or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle
occupants.◀
Using the middle safety belt
If the middle safety belt in the rear is used,
the larger section of the backrest must be
locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have
a restraining effect.◀
Folding down the right side
The right side can be folded down from the front.
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Folding down the left side and middle
section
The left side and middle section can be folded
down together. Reach into the recess in the side
section and pull forwards.
With the through-loading system:*
Enlarging the cargo area
General information
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–
20–40.
The right side and the middle section can be
folded down separately, while the left side is al‐
ways folded down together with the middle sec‐
tion.
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat backr‐
ests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in the area of movement and that
no one reaches into the area of movement of the
rear seat backrests when the middle section is
folded down. Otherwise, injury or damage may
result.◀
Locking the backrest
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, the restraining effect of the
safety belts may be limited in an accident.◀
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. The red warning
field in the control display disappears. If it is not
properly engaged, transported cargo could en‐
ter the passenger compartment during braking
or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle
occupants.◀
Using the middle safety belt
If the middle safety belt in the rear is used,
the larger section of the backrest must be
locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have
a restraining effect.◀
Seite 111
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Folding down the sides
The right side can be folded down separately.
The left side can be folded down in combination
with the middle section.
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Partition net*
Do not let the partition net snap back into
place
Do not allow the partition net to snap back into
place; otherwise, there is a danger of injury and
the partition net could be damaged.◀
With a normal cargo area
1.
Fold open the rear covers on the headliner.
2. Pull the partition net out of the case by the
strap.
3. Insert the bars into the brackets on both
sides in the headliner toward the front, ar‐
row. This is best performed from the rear
seat.
If the partition net is no longer needed: proceed
in reverse order.
With an enlarged cargo area
1.
Fold down the entire rear seat backrest.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, to unlock the case
on both sides.
3. Pull out the case toward the rear, arrow 2.
Make sure not to tilt it in the process.
4. Slide the case all the way into the guides,
arrows 1, on the backs of the backrests.
5. Fold open the front covers on the headliner.
6. Carefully pull out the partition net and insert
it into the brackets as in the normal cargo
area, refer to page 112.
This is best performed from the front seat.
Seite 112
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Interior equipment
If the partition net is no longer needed: proceed
in reverse order.
Finally, slide the case forward into both brackets
on the sides until it engages. The red warning
fields disappear.
Tug on the case to check if it is properly locked
in place.
Seite 113
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 114.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 114.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets* on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Net* in the front passenger footwell.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
Connection for importing and exporting data on
USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 34.
▷ Music collection, refer to page 162.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
Opening
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the center
arm rest up, arrow 2.
Seite 114
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Storage compartments
Connection for an external audio
device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 166.
▷ USB audio interface*, refer to page 167.
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Front
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after the
other.
Pushing back the covers
Push back the covers before folding up the
center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could
become damaged.◀
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Seite 115
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage space under the floor cover
Raise the floor panel.
The storage space under the floor panel is sub‐
divided.
Storage space under the floor cover
with subdividers*
Raise the floor panel.
The storage space under the floor panel is sub‐
divided. Two additional subdividers can be in‐
serted to partition it further.
Storage compartment on the right side
A water-proof storage compartment is available
on the right side of the cargo area floor.
Hooks/multi-function hook
Multi-function hooks are available on the left and
right* cargo area walls.
Retaining strap*
A retaining strap is available on the right side trim
for fastening small objects.
Net*
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
left side of the cargo area.
Storage compartment on the side
To open: pull the handle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 123, with
nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
4 lashing eyes.
Seite 116
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Storage compartments
Lashing eyes in the cargo area with
rail*
To secure the cargo, refer to page 123, with
nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
4 lashing eyes.
To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐
row 1.
Reversible floor panel*
The bottom of the floor panel is coated with a
water- and dirt-resistant finish.
Fold the floor panel up, remove it and flip it over.
To simplify loading of the compartment, attach
the hook under the floor panel to the fixture on
the cargo area ceiling.
FlexNet*
The flexible storage net is hooked into eyes and
secures the cargo in the cargo area. The storage
net can be attached to the following eyes:
▷ Lashing eyes on the rail system.
▷ Eyes behind the seats on the cargo area wall.
▷ Eyes in the D-pillar.
The eyes are located on both sides of the cargo
area.
Folding box*
A folding box is located under the cargo area
floor.
Seite 117
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speeds:
▷ For gasoline engine, 4500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/
300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in
period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking or
evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road
users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam‐
aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the
passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
1.
Drive moderately.
2. Close all windows and the glass sunroof*.
3. Greatly increase the blower speed.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐
ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care
to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐
haust system and any highly flammable materi‐
als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious
personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
is the danger of getting burned.◀
Seite 120
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Things to remember when driving
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the
vehicle without connecting them directly to the
external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐
tronics and mobile communication devices can
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
assurance that the radiation generated during
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 11.8 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission/Sport automatic trans‐
mission*:
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐
matic transmission.
Seite 121
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
Loading
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard*:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Seite 122
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Things to remember when driving
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as possible, ideally directly behind the rear
seat.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow cargo.
▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 112, to
protect passengers. Make sure that objects
cannot penetrate the partition net.
Place protective material around any sharp-
edged or pointed objects that could bump
against the rear window while the vehicle is
in motion.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Lashing eyes in the cargo area with a
rail*
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, a cargo net* or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps*.
Cargo straps can be attached to four lashing
eyes located in the cargo area.
The cargo area package* makes additional
lashing eyes available.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Seite 123
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Note
Roof-mounted luggage racks are only available
for vehicles with roof rails*.
Special rack system as optional
accessory
A special rack system is available as an optional
accessory.
Follow the directions given in the installation in‐
structions.
Anchorage points
The roof rails* provide mounting points for the
roof-mounted luggage rack.
Follow the directions given in the installation in‐
structions.
Mounting
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for raising and opening the glass sunroof*.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e. g., tie with
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Saving fuel
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 219, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass sunroof*
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure, refer to page 207, at least twice a
month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Seite 124
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Things to remember when driving
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a halt in the highest
applicable gear.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is
switched off for only approx. 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions that are not
currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 219.
Seite 125
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation*
Navigation system
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Destination input
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 24.
Stored town/city and street names can be called
up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/
city can be skipped.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1.
Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1.
Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the town/city name from the list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1.
Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1.
Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
Seite 128
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Select an entry.
Entering a street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1.
Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1.
Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the destination
city/town
The desired street does not exist in the specified
city/town because it belongs to another part of
the city/town.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" the displayed country.
All streets of the selected state/province are
offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
played after the street name.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1.
"Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 134.
Address book
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these have been checked as destinations.
Seite 129
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
If the mobile phone* does not display the
contacts with addresses, they must first be
Destination checked, refer to page 186.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
"A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 187.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Seite 130
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
Last destinations
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.
The destinations can be called up and used as a
destination for destination guidance.
Calling up the last destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
Starting destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
Opening the search for special
destinations
To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or
tourist attractions:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Select the search function.
Online Search*
1. "Google™ Search"
2. Select a special destination.
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search
1.
"A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city.
3. "Category"
4. Select the category.
5. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
6. "Keyword"
7. Enter the keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
9. Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 134.
Seite 131
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
"Start search": if a search term is not entered,
the search is repeated with the previous search
term.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city.
3. "Category"
4. Select the category.
5. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
6. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
7. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
8. Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 134.
Display of special destinations
List of special destinations: special destinations
are organized by distance and are displayed with
a directional arrow to the special destination.
on the split screen, special destinations of the
selected category are displayed in the map view
as symbols. The display depends on the scale
of the map and the category.
Destination entry via BMW Assist*
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 196.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is indi‐
cated on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
Seite 132
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
Specifying the street
If the system does not recognize a street, one of
the following is displayed:
▷ The name of a street in the vicinity.
▷ The county.
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
Additional functions
Additional functions are available on the inter‐
active map after the controller is pressed.
▷ Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 134.
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ "View in northern direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for spe‐
cial destinations is started.
Destination entry by voice*
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice operation
and iDrive.
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹
Saying the entries
▷ the town/city, street, and house number can
be entered as a single command*.
▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐
tersections can be said as whole words* or
spelled in the language of the system, refer
to page 73.
Example: to enter a town/city in a US state
as a whole word, the language of the system
must be English.
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The options available for entering data de‐
pend on the navigation data and the country
and language settings.
entering an address using a command*
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g., the town/city.
Seite 133
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Entering a town/city separately
The name of the town/city can be said as a
word* or spelled out.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city, or say at least
the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies may be suggested.
5. Select the town/city.
▷ To select a recommended town/
city: ›Yes‹
▷ To select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹ e.g., entry 2
▷ To spell an entry: ›Spell city‹
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
list and displayed as one location followed by an
ellipsis.
1.
Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹ e.g., En‐
try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number separately
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
house numbers up to number 2000 can be en‐
tered.
1.
›House number‹
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Planning a trip with intermediate
destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned with several intermediate
destinations.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
4. "Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1.
"Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is located in the desired position
in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Seite 134
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
Starting the trip
1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
tered, highlight the first destination.
If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
started, the first destination is skipped.
2. "Start guidance"
This symbol marks the active leg of the
trip.
Store the trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the name.
4. "OK"
Select the stored trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Reversing the direction of travel
Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1.
"Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options
1.
"Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Delete the stored trip
1. "Stored trips"
2. Highlight the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
With the Professional navigation
system: Open the last trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
Destination guidance
Starting destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 128.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
▷ The route is shown on the Control Display.
▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐
ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐
rival are displayed in the map view.
▷ The arrow view is shown in the instrument
cluster, in the Head-up Display*, and on the
Control Display where appropriate.
Terminating destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance"
Seite 135
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Continuing destination guidance
If the destination was not reached during the last
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina‐
tion guidance.
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when plan‐
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
▷ The recommended route may differ from the
route you would take based on personal ex‐
perience.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 141.
Changing the route criteria
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest pos‐
sible route and the fastest roads.
▷ "Efficient route": optimized combi‐
nation of the fastest and shortest route.
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress will
be.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive route guidance. The individual sug‐
gestions are highlighted in color.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on
the Control Display.
▷ List of streets and towns/cities.
▷ Map view, refer to page 138.
▷ Arrow view in the Head-up Display*, refer to
page 99.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: current direction of travel.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in di‐
rection.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direction.
Seite 136
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Displaying a list of streets or towns/
cities on the route
With destination guidance started, a list of the
streets and towns/cities on the route can be dis‐
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle‐
tins are displayed for each route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Bypassing a section of the route
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo‐
meters within which you would like to return
to the original route.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐
tions along the route are displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
The position of the gas station is displayed
on the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Voice instructions"
Repeating spoken instructions
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
Seite 137
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
cess.
Map view
Selecting the map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
At a glance
1 Function bar
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status field
7 Lower status field
Lines in the map
Streets and routes are displayed in different col‐
ors and styles depending on their classification.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con‐
nections. Country borders are indicated by thin
lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indicate
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend‐
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian‐
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
obstruction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction.
▷ Gray traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 139.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
Status fields
Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the func‐
tion bar:
Symbol Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destination.
Display the traffic bulletins.
Interactive map.
Set the map view.
Change the scale.
To change to the function bar, move the con‐
troller to the left.
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
Seite 138
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The map shows the entire route be‐
tween the current location and the destination.
Settings for the map view
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
Set the map view.
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
▷ With the Professional navigation system:
"Satellite images"
Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images* are displayed in a scale of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
Prominent areas that are contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map in
3D.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins, refer to page 139. Symbols for the
special destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for split screen
The map view can be selected for the split
screen independently from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
5. Select the map view.
▷ "Arrow display"
▷ "Map facing north"
▷ "Map direction of travel"
▷ "Map view with perspective"
▷ "Position"
▷ "Exit ramp view"
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: select the split screen
and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins*
At a glance
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Informa‐
tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is
updated continuously.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display real-
time traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional terms
and conditions apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
End-User is in material breach of the terms
and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network through
which it is delivered. You may not modify,
copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
Seite 139
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
and hold harmless BMW of North America,
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
any and all claims, damages, costs or other
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
Network, including, but not limited to, any
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
or representations with respect to the li‐
censed material (including, without limita‐
tion, that the licensed material will be error-
free, will operate without interruption or that
the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐
bility, non-infringement fitness for a
particular purpose, or those arising from a
course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
dental damages (including, without limita‐
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
profits relating to the same) arising from any
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
possibility of such damages. These limita‐
tions apply to all claims, including, without
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such
as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
tial damages, so those particular limitations
may not apply to you.
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map
by symbols.
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area
are stored in a list.
The symbol in the function bar of the map
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins
that affect the calculated route.
Switching the reception on/off
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Open the traffic bulletins
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First the traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
cle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Traffic bulletins on the map
When the traffic situation/gray card is activated,
the view on the Control Display is switched over
to shades of gray. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is dis‐
regarded in this setting. Symbols and special
destinations are not displayed.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
Seite 140
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the
calculated route.
▷ Red: congestion.
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic.
▷ Green: clear roads.
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins, e.g., construc‐
tion site.
The displayed information depends on the par‐
ticular traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the
map.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐
played on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route
are always shown.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
den.
Destination guidance with traffic
bulletins
Semi-dynamic destination guidance
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic information into account. A mes‐
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
A detour is suggested in the event of a traffic
obstruction. In addition, distance and time dif‐
ferences between the original route and the de‐
tour are displayed.
To accept the detour:
"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e.g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
Seite 141
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
To activate dynamic destination guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Navigation data
Information on the navigation data
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information is displayed on the data version.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your service center. Navigation
data are stored in the vehicle and can be up‐
dated.
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ The system restarts after the update.
▷ The data carrier with the navigation data can
be removed after the update is complete.
Perform an update
1.
Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
After interrupting your trip, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display.
Viewing the status
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation update"
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
be determined.
Input any street in the selected city and start
destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination.
Select a goal that is as close as possible to
the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
When the traffic situation/gray card is acti‐
vated, the view on the Control Display is
switched over to shades of gray. This ena‐
bles a better view of the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
Seite 142
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Navigation
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
culate a new route suggestion.
Seite 143
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Entertainment
The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations and playing
CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Tone
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback,
surround*
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
When surround is activated, multi-channel play‐
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is
played.
Seite 146
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Tone
Volume
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal* com‐
pared to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone*
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers*
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Seite 147
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Radio
Controls
1 Change entertainment sources
2 Change station/track
3 Programmable memory buttons
4 Volume, on/off
5 Change wave band
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Changing the station via the button
Press the button.
Storing a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Seite 148
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Radio
RDS*
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band. When
playing a station with multiple frequencies, the
system automatically switches to the frequency
with the best reception, if needed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Due to
time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe‐
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐
tist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds. If reception is interrupted
for an extended period, it switches back to the
main station.
Weather Band*
General information
The availability of the Weather Band and the
number of available channels can vary depend‐
ing on the region.
Switching on the Weather Band
1.
"Radio"
2. "Weather band"
3. Select the desired channel.
Additional information
Weather Band is a service of the National Oce‐
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).
Seite 149
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Additional information on the Internet:
www.nws.noaa.gov.
Satellite radio*
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/
open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 23.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
Seite 150
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Radio
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the buttons on the center console
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Selecting a category
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must
be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer
is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
Seite 151
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
For live transmissions: "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐
tivated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Seite 152
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Radio
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
onds: "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
1.
"Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1.
"Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad‐
cast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Notes
▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages; next to tall buildings;
or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Seite 153
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Stored stations
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Seite 154
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Radio
CD/multimedia
Controls
1 Change the entertainment source
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD* drive
4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
6 Volume, on/off
CD/DVD*
Playback
Filling the CD/DVD* player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or
DVD changer*.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD* player
... DVD changer*
Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video*.
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD*, SVCD*.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*,
M4A*.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired track is played.
Seite 155
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Selecting the track using the iDrive
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly.
1.
Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
▷ Interpret.
▷ Album track.
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD*.
▷ File name of track.
Random playback
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD*.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files: All
tracks in the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Seite 156
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
Automatic repeat*
The selected CDs or DVDs are repeated auto‐
matically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on
the DVD.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
0 All regions
Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the
parking brake is set or if the automatic trans‐
mission is in position P.
DVD video
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
VCD/SVCD
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
Video menu
To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
ing playback.
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu.
Start playback.
Pause
Stop
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐
ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback.
DVD menu
1.
If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
Seite 157
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language*
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the subtitles*
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Selecting the zoom
Display the video image on the entire screen.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
Seite 158
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting a track
DVD video:
1.
Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1.
"Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle*
The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
DVD changer*
In the cargo area
The DVD changer is stored behind the left side
trim in the cargo area.
Controls and displays
1 Empty DVD compartments
2 LED on DVD slot
3 Buttons for DVD compartments
4 DVD slot
5 Fill DVD compartments
Filling the DVD compartments
individually
1.
Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment.
Seite 159
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
Filling all empty DVD compartments
1. Hold the button down.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash.
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin
flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into
the center of the slot.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
and placed into the vacant compartments.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Removing a single CD/DVD
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1.
Hold the button down.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Malfunctions
If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap‐
idly, a malfunction has occurred.
To eliminate the malfunction:
1. Press one of the buttons:
▷
▷
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
The DVD changer is functional again after the
LEDs stop flashing rapidly.
Audio playback*
The audio track of a DVD can be played back
even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
hicle.
Only the main film without the previews or extras
can be played back.
Starting playback
A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
Selecting a chapter using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired chapter is played.
Selecting a chapter using iDrive
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Select the desired chapter.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Selecting the language*
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Seite 160
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Audio/language"
6. Select the desired language.
Notes
CD/DVD player and changer
Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage may occur.◀
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
General malfunctions
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
only be used for private purposes. Copying of
this technology is prohibited.
Seite 161
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
and other patents granted and registered in the
USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg‐
istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. ©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Music collection*
Storing music
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A*, and
AAC* formats are stored. Individual tracks
and directories can be deleted later, Delet‐
ing a track and directory, refer to page 165.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
disk.◀
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
ery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
this will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored
can be called up.
Interrupting storage
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Seite 162
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name of
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the
USB audio interface in the center armrest.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 114.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 164.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
Seite 163
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired entry:
▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search using spoken instructions*
Instructions for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹.
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
Seite 164
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
The first track is played automatically, if pos‐
sible.
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
dom order.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album*
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Seite 165
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐
ing a long trip.
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
External devices
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Bluetooth audio*
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.
Seite 166
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
Connect the headphones or line-out connector
of the device to the jack plug.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary. "External devices".
4. "AUX front"
The sound is played back on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary. "External devices".
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface*/mobile phone
audio interface*
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter when equip‐
ped with extended connectivity of the music
player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Playback might only be possible if no con‐
nector is plugged into the USB audio inter‐
face.
Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
ble on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC*, M4A*.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL*, PLS*.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via
USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
To connect the device, use the special cable
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available
from your service center, or a flexible adapter
cable*.
Seite 167
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone
with the AUX-IN port and USB in‐
terface using the special cable
adapter or with the USB interface
using the flexible adapter cable*.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the
USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect
the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the
USB interface.
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 16,000 or 26,000* tracks can be stored
in the vehicle. If a fifth device is connected or if
more than 16000 or 26000* tracks are stored,
information on existing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
The playback starts with the first track.
On the split screen*, the CD cover for the music
track might be displayed after a few seconds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track.
▷ In addition, for USB devices: file directory
and, if available, composer.
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
Seite 168
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
played.
6. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
▷ The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not additionally con‐
nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
otherwise, playback may be compromised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio*
At a glance
▷ Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 177.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the
volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Seite 169
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Information under
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
page 177, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
device, such as for a connection without
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
key. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
3. If necessary. "Bluetooth audio".
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
to the device operating instructions: for in‐
stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth
device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device display.
Prompt via iDrive or the device to enter the
same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select the desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, for instance
"Audio".
9. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed
as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 172.
Connecting a specific device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue‐
tooth.
Requirements
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
ces.
Seite 170
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. "Audio"
8. "OK"
Connecting the device
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
Playback
General information
▷ The display of music track information de‐
pends on the device.
▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1.
Connect the device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐
essary.
Playback menu*
Depending on the particular device, some of the
functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous music track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Disconnecting the audio connection
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
3. Highlight the desired device.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
Seite 171
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Unpairing a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable devices can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 176.
▷ The device is not supported by the vehicle.
Perform a software update*, refer to
page 172, if needed.
▷ The device could not be paired or con‐
nected.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the device and via iDrive.
Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
with other devices if necessary.
Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter or via the charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
vice off and on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Music cannot be played back.
Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
Switch the radio off and on again.
▷ Music files can only be played back softly.
Adjust the volume settings on the device.
▷ Playback is disturbed when buttons are
pressed or by other messages on the de‐
vice.
Switch off the button tones and other signal
tones on the device.
▷ Playback is interrupted by a telephone call
or traffic bulletin and is not resumed auto‐
matically.
Switch the radio off and on again.
▷ Playback is not possible if the mobile phone
is connected both via Bluetooth Audio and
via the extended connectivity of the music
player in the mobile phone*.
Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 171, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
Software update*
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version. A
software update may result in vehicle support of
new mobile phones or new external devices, for
example.
Software updates and related current informa‐
tion is available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
Updating the software
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Seite 172
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
CD/multimedia
1. Store the file for the software update in the
main directory on a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in‐
terface of the USB audio interface in the
center armrest. An update via the USB in‐
terface in the glove compartment is not pos‐
sible.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All listed software updates are installed.
Restoring the previous version
If it should become necessary, the software ver‐
sion prior to the last software update can be re‐
stored.
The previous version may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK"
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist*, Of‐
fice functions*, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again. This
also applies to displaying the currently installed
software version.
Seite 173
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Professional mobile phone preparation
package*
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are inside the ve‐
hicle and can be operated via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation*.
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone
or as an audio source.
The telephone functions are described in the
following. Operating the audio functions, refer to
page 169.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the
mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter*
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
tenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue‐
tooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which mo‐
bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
preparation package. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
this may lead to a malfunction.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele‐
phone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 170.
Seite 176
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Professional mobile phone preparation package
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"
Additional functions
General information
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
able mobile phones, refer to page 176, that sup‐
port these functions.
Additional telephone
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
telephone.
The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 180. While a call is
active on the additional telephone, incoming
calls are displayed on the Control Display.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Activating/deactivating the additional
functions
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. Select the desired additional function.
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Office"
▷ "Bluetooth audio"
Pairing and connecting a device
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Prompt via iDrive or the mobile phone to en‐
ter the same Bluetooth passkey.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
Seite 177
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle at
once. Three devices can be connected with the
vehicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 179.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card* or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Four devices can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Connecting a specific device
If more than one device is detected by the vehi‐
cle, the device at the top of the list is connected.
A different device can be connected by select‐
ing it.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Select the device that is to be connected.
The functions that were assigned to the device
before unpairing are assigned to the device
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated.
Configuring the devices
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected devices.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
vice that is already connected and the device will
be unpaired.
Swapping the telephone and additional
telephone
The function of the telephone and additional tel‐
ephone can be swapped automatically.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing a device
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
Seite 178
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Professional mobile phone preparation package
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 176.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter* or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
▷ The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and on again. Repeat
the pairing procedure.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed,
or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card*
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries being
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e.g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or additional telephone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter* or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed. The settings can only be created during
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
telephone. The settings are deleted when the
telephone is unpaired.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
"Loudspeak."
Seite 179
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, the
name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
only the phone number is displayed.
If more than one phone number is assigned to a
contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to the additional telephone is
automatically rejected if there is an active call on
the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Via iDrive
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster*
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
Via iDrive
"Reject"
Via the instrument cluster*
"Reject"
Ending a call
Via iDrive
"Hang up"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster*
"End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
Calls with multiple participants
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active call.
Seite 180
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Professional mobile phone preparation package
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call
The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
"Transfer"
The call on hold is resumed.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1.
Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone muted"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer‐
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone num‐
ber.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
out reception or network, or Service
Request* is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number: se‐
lect the required contact. The connection is be‐
ing established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
Seite 181
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. The 20 phone numbers dialed
last are displayed. The sorting order of the
phone numbers depends on the particular mo‐
bile phone.
Dialing the number via the instrument
cluster
This is possible when there is no active call.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Dialing a number via iDrive
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone num‐
ber if necessary.
The connection is established.
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select "New phone number" or contact.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
Received calls
Displaying calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
played.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select "New phone number" or contact.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
Seite 182
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Professional mobile phone preparation package
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
Snap-in adapter*
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting the snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
Inserting the mobile phone
1.
Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac‐
ing up in the direction of the electrical con‐
nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar‐
row 2 until it engages.
Seite 183
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Seite 184
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Professional mobile phone preparation package
Office*
At a glance
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile
phone provides compatible support of these
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand‐
ards.
Information about which mobile phones support
the Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of‐
fice.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.
The mobile phone has read-access only.
Data are updated regularly via the mobile phone.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 72, are correctly set on the Control
Display and on the mobile phone to correctly
display appointments, for example.
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 177.
Office information
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone* are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone, and contacts from the BMW Search ad‐
dress book* are displayed. The addresses can
be adopted as destinations for navigation and
the phone numbers can be dialed.
Displaying contacts
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 24.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Seite 185
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination*
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the vehi‐
cle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
Displaying a contact's Internet
address*
An Internet address stored for a contact can be
called up.
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the Internet address.
The selected Internet address is displayed
in the browser.
New contact
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "New contact"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
Seite 186
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Office
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the vehi‐
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
If necessary, "Accept address".
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Various contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
Symbol Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
Other phone number.
Home address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1.
"Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the
names*
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"Contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored on
the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
may differ from the selected sorting order.
Show contact pictures*
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic‐
tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
1. "Contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Show images"
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
activated.
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 33. The contacts
stored in the vehicle are exported, but not those
from the mobile phone or from BMW Search*.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone*
cannot be deleted.
1.
"Contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts".
Messages
General information
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from
the mobile phone are displayed depends on
whether transmission from the mobile phone to
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-
mails may not be supported by the service pro‐
vider, or the function may need to be enabled
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired,
transmission may take several minutes. Mes‐
sages are only displayed in full length when the
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi‐
tional telephone are not transmitted.
Display of different messages:
▷ Text messages.
Seite 187
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ My Info* messages from the BMW Assist
Portal.
▷ Messages from the BMW Assist Concierge
service*.
▷ E-mails from the mobile phone.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
My Info
Message from the Concierge serv‐
ice.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service, My Info,
and BMW Search* can be deleted.
Delete a message:
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"
Delete all messages:
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages"
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving the sender in the contacts
1. Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Reading the text message out loud
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 192.
My Info
Starting destination guidance
1.
Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Dialing the number in the message
Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
a message.
1.
Select the desired message.
2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, the con‐
nection is established.
"Select phone number":
If the message contains more than one num‐
ber, select the desired number from the list.
The connection is established.
Opening the Internet address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. "Open link in browser"
Message from the Concierge service
Starting destination guidance
1.
Select the desired message.
Seite 188
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Office
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
Dialing the number in the message
Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
a message.
1.
Select the desired message.
2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, the con‐
nection is established.
"Select phone number":
If the message contains more than one num‐
ber, select the desired number from the list.
The connection is established.
Storing an address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Opening the Internet address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. "Open link in browser"
Displaying additional information
1.
Select the desired message.
2. "Further information"
E-mail*
Displaying e-mails
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans‐
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con‐
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data
If phone numbers or e-mail addresses are in‐
cluded in the e-mail, they can be used directly
or stored under contacts.
Display the contact or select the phone number:
1.
"Use contact data"
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
To save contact data:
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading the e-mail out loud
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 192.
Calendar
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 and the next 50
days can be displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Calendar"
Seite 189
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Selecting the calendar day
1. Select the date.
2. Select the desired day or date.
▷ "Next day"
▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Display the appointment
1.
Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
sary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
If phone numbers or e-mail addresses are in‐
cluded in the appointment, they can be used di‐
rectly or stored under contacts.
Display the contact or select the phone number:
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
To save contact data:
1. "Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 192.
Tasks
Displaying the task list
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
1.
"Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list
1.
Select the header in the task list.
2. Select the sorting criterion:
▷ "Priority (!)"*
▷ "Subject"
▷ "Due date"
Seite 190
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Office
Displaying the task
1. Select the desired task.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
If phone numbers of e-mail addresses are in‐
cluded in the task, they can be used directly or
stored under contacts.
Display the contact or select the phone number:
1.
"Use contact data"
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
To save contact data:
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading the task out loud
Read the task out loud, refer to page 192.
Notes
Displaying notes
1.
"Office"
2. "Notepad"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note
1. Select the desired note.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
If phone numbers of e-mail addresses are in‐
cluded in the note, they can be used directly or
stored under contacts.
Display the contact or select the phone number:
1.
"Use contact data"
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
To save contact data:
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading the note out loud
Read the note out loud, refer to page 192.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
Seite 191
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task are
displayed.
Reading out loud
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
The following options are available during read‐
ing:
▷ "Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading.
▷ "To beginning"
Start reading message again from the be‐
ginning.
▷ Select the symbol.
Skip a paragraph.
▷ Select the symbol.
Go back one paragraph.
▷ To end reading, tilt the controller to the left.
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 176.
▷ Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages,
or e-mails from the mobile phone are not
displayed.
The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor‐
rectly.
The Office function is deactivated.
The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
tional phone.
Appointments are older than 20 days or are
more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
vehicle.
▷ Not all appointments and tasks from the mo‐
bile phone are displayed at the right time?
The time zone, time or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone.
▷ Entries are not displayed in full length.
Text were already transmitted from the mo‐
bile phone in a shortened form.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes.
▷ The contact pictures are not being dis‐
played?
Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
▷ If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
Seite 192
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Office
Contacts*
General information
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 24.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the vehi‐
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
7. If necessary, "Store".
8. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts.
Displaying contacts
1.
"Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 24.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Seite 193
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination*
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1.
Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 33.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts".
Seite 194
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Contacts
BMW Assist
BMW Assist*
General information
BMW Assist provides you with certain services,
e.g., transmission of the position data of your
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if
an Emergency Request* has been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a
service center. After the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a service center after you sign a
new contract.
Requirements
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in to a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit‐
ting the services.
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your service center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling
must have been completed.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐
sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
tomer Relations for information on all as‐
pects of your vehicle.
▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit‐
ted to your service center, either automati‐
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
ample, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
mine its position.
▷ In addition to these services, the optional
Convenience Plan offers the Concierge
service and information for route planning,
traffic, and weather. A limited number of
calls can be made via the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center with Critical Calling if, for ex‐
ample, the mobile phone is not available or
discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
BMW TeleService*
General information
TeleService supports communication with your
service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In
this way, the service center can plan its work
Seite 195
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The engine is running.
Using BMW TeleService*
BMW TeleService are typically activated in the
vehicle.
Even if the BMW TeleService are not active, a
voice contact to Roadside Assistance is still
possible.
To continue using or to deactivate the services,
please contact your service partner or the BMW
customer hotline.
Concierge service*
General information
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established with the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicles not equipped with BMW
Assist or BMW TeleService
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
Seite 196
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
BMW Assist
Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
lished.
TeleService Help*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire‐
less transmission.
TeleService Help can be started after a prompt
by Roadside Assistance and the termination of
the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help
1.
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
BMW Search*
At a glance
A business search can be opened via BMW
Search.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
▷ The date setting, refer to page 72, on the
Control Display is current.
▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
work coverage.
Starting BMW Search
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. If necessary, "OK".
The BMW Search home page is displayed.
Operating BMW Search
To start a search:
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
Seite 197
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Internet*
General information
For your own safety, the Internet is only dis‐
played to approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in some
market-specific versions only with the vehicle
stationary.
Opening the Internet
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "Internet"
3. If necessary, "OK".
The start page is displayed. The Internet pages
may not have exactly the same appearance as
on a PC. Flash and Java applications may display
incorrectly.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Using the Internet
Menu bar
A menu bar is displayed for operation. To acti‐
vate the menu bar, move the controller to the left
until the cursor is located in the menu bar.
Symbol Function
Activate the mouse pointer.
Open the start page.
Update, reload.
Cancel.
Back.
Enter the URL.
Bookmarks/favorites.
Zoom.
Leave the browser.
Navigating with the mouse pointer
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Use the mouse pointer to navigate the page.
▷ To move the mouse pointer: move the
controller in the required direction.
▷ To move the mouse pointer diagonally:
move the controller in the required di‐
rection and turn it.
Seite 198
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
BMW Assist
▷ To select an element: move the mouse
pointer onto the element and press the
controller.
▷ To scroll: turn the controller.
Status display
A symbol at the top left of the screen shows the
following statuses:
Symbol Meaning
No connection possible.
Data transfer/connection.
Secure connection.
Entering an Internet address
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Enter the address and select "OK".
Move the controller up to change between
upper and lower case letters.
Bookmarks/favorites
Adding a bookmark
The page currently being displayed is stored as
a bookmark.
1.
Select the symbol.
2. "Add to bookmarks"
Selecting a bookmark
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select the desired bookmark.
Deleting a bookmark
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Highlight the bookmark that is to be deleted.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all
bookmarks"
Defining a bookmark as the start page
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Highlight the desired bookmark.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set as home URL"
Disconnecting the connection
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Bluetooth data transfer"
Seite 199
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Adjusting
Suppressing cookies
1. Open "Options".
2. "Suppress cookies"
Suppressing pop-ups
1. Open "Options".
2. "Suppress pop-ups"
Suppressing safety warnings
1. Open "Options".
2. "Block HTTPS pop-ups"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Service Request*
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re‐
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Automatic Service Request*
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
Seite 200
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
BMW Assist
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Services status*
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1.
"BMW Assist"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manual update of TeleService*, BMW Assist*,
and BMW Search*.
"Update BMW Assist"
TeleService Report*
Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the
ongoing development of BMW products from
your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec‐
essary.
TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that
meet certain technical requirements and have a
valid Assist contract; this feature is free of
charge.
Neither personal data nor position data is trans‐
mitted.
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Teleservice Info"
Seite 201
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Refueling
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐
bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.◀
Seite 204
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Refueling
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 17.7 US gal/67 liters.
Refuel promptly
Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.◀
Seite 205
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Fuel
Fuel quality
Refuel with unleaded fuel only
Do not use leaded fuel as this would per‐
manently damage the catalytic converter.◀
Do not refuel with ethanol
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI
89
BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.
Gasoline with lower AKI
The minimum AKI Rating is 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine
damage may occur.◀
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differ‐
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐
ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in
the United States and Canada.
Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha‐
nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen
by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not
void the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems es‐
pecially under certain environmental conditions
such as high ambient temperature and high al‐
titude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in unscheduled maintenance.◀
Seite 206
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Fuel
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐
itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 207, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
This information can be obtained from your
service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Vehicle load.
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 207, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
X3 28iA
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
Specifications in
psi/kilopascal with
cold tires
225/55 R 17 102
H M+S
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/60 R 17 99 H M
+S
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Seite 207
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
F: 245/40 R 19 98 W
R: 275/40 R 19 101
W
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F: 245/40 R 19 102
V M+S
R: 275/40 R 19 105
V M+S
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R: 275/35 R 20 102
Y XL
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.6 / 38
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
4.2 / 60 4.2 / 60
X3 35iA
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
Specifications in
psi/kilopascal with
cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
F: 245/40 R 19 98 W
R: 275/40 R 19 101
W
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F: 245/40 R 19 102
V M+S
R: 275/40 R 19 105
V M+S
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
F: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R: 275/35 R 20 102
Y XL
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.6 / 38
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
4.2 / 60 4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
X3 28iA
With partial load:
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
Specifications in
psi/kilopascal with
cold tires
225/55 R 17 102
H M+S
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/60 R 17 99 H M
+S
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Seite 208
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
F: 245/40 R 19 98 W
R: 275/40 R 19 101
W
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F: 245/40 R 19 102
V M+S
R: 275/40 R 19 105
V M+S
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R: 275/35 R 20 102
Y XL
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.6 / 38
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
4.2 / 60 4.2 / 60
With full load
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
Specifications in
psi/kilopascal with
cold tires
225/55 R 17 102
H M+S
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
225/60 R 17 99 H M
+S
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
F: 245/40 R 19 98 W
R: 275/40 R 19 101
W
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.6 / 38
F: 245/40 R 19 102
V M+S
R: 275/40 R 19 105
V M+S
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.6 / 38
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
F: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R: 275/35 R 20 102
Y XL
-
2.6 / 38
2.8 / 41
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
4.2 / 60 4.2 / 60
X3 35iA
With partial load:
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
Specifications in
psi/kilopascal with
cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
F: 245/40 R 19 98 W
R: 275/40 R 19 101
W
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F: 245/40 R 19 102
V M+S
R: 275/40 R 19 105
V M+S
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R: 275/35 R 20 102
Y XL
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.6 / 38
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
4.2 / 60 4.2 / 60
With full load:
Seite 209
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Tire size Pressure specifications
in psi/kPa
Specifications in
psi/kilopascal with
cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
F: 245/40 R 19 98 W
R: 275/40 R 19 101
W
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.8 / 41
F: 245/40 R 19 102
V M+S
R: 275/40 R 19 105
V M+S
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.0 / 44
F: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R: 275/35 R 20 102
Y XL
2.4 / 35
-
-
3.0 / 44
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
4.2 / 60 4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
255/50 R 19 103 Y
255: nominal width in mm
50: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
19: rim diameter in inches
103: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3510: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 3510: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2010.
Recommendation: regardless of wear, replace
tires at least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices
Seite 210
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Wheels and tires
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
sible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Seite 211
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Manufacture date
On the sidewall:
DOT … 3510: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2010.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Seite 212
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Wheels and tires
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires*
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire., refer to
page 84
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended.
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/65 R 17.
▷ 225/60 R 17.
▷ 245/50 R 18.
Seite 213
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
No snow chains with tires of size 245/45 R
19
Do not mount snow chains on tires of size
245/45 R 19; otherwise, the vehicle can become
damaged.◀
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to
the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Seite 214
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number*
3 Jump starting, negative terminal
4 Jump starting, positive terminal
5 Coolant reservoir
6 Oil filler neck
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
1.
Pull the lever.
Seite 215
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
Make sure you hear the engine compartment lid
engage.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 216
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Engine compartment
Engine oil
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on the
driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, check the engine oil level after every
refueling using the electronic engine oil level
check.
Checking the oil level
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically and dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Requirements
▷ The engine must be running and warm after
the vehicle has been driven for at least
6 miles/10 km.
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.
Displaying the oil level
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap‐
prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Note the newly calculated remaining mile‐
age until the next oil service. Have the sys‐
tem checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Recommended oil types, refer to page 217.
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types
Note
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine damage.◀
Seite 217
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Approved oil types
Your service center can advise you on which en‐
gine oils have been approved by the manufac‐
turer of your vehicle.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only use approved BMW High Performance oil.
Approved oils belong to the viscosity grades
SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE
5W-30.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow‐
ing specification may be used.
API SM quality standards or higher.
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Coolant level
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, and then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing
of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 218
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Engine oil
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The system obtains information about the road
safety and operational reliability of the vehicle
and takes into account aspects such as a timely
vehicle check. The aim is to optimize mainte‐
nance procedures with a view to reducing the
cost of running the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 73, can be displayed on the Control
Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
your service center. Make sure to have regular
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehicle
emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under cer‐
tain circumstances:
Seite 219
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have
the system checked immediately;
otherwise, serious engine misfiring
within a brief period can seriously
damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
ing vehicle functions further.
In addition, if you signed a service contract for
Assist, certain vehicle data can be sent directly
from the vehicle to facilitate the desired serv‐
ices.
Seite 220
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Maintenance
Replacing components
Tool kit
The tool kit is located under the first aid kit be‐
hind the left folding cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
page 64, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
Replacing the rear wiper blades
1.
Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper
blade, arrow.
2. Attach a new wiper blade. It must engage
audibly.
Lamp and bulb replacement
General information
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
your service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your service center.
Seite 221
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el‐
ements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the
light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐
rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses
do not need to be changed.
If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water
droplets form in the lamp, have it checked by
your service center.
Front lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
Halogen headlamps
1 High beams/headlamp flasher
2 Parking lamps
3 Low beams
4 Turn signal/side marker light
Xenon headlamps*
1 Parking lamps/daytime running lights*
2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal/side marker light
Halogen headlamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 221.
Low beams
55-watt bulb, H7
Seite 222
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Replacing components
1. Open the hood, refer to page 215.
2. Unscrew the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move it.
3. Carefully pull out the connector.
4. Pull the bulb off the connector and insert the
new bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
High beams/headlamp flasher and parking
lamps
High beams/headlamp flasher: 55-watt bulb, H7
Parking lamps: 5-watt bulb, W5W
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 215.
2. Press, arrow 1, and fold out the cover, ar‐
row 2.
3. Remove the bulb holder.
The lower bulb is the high beam and head‐
lamp flasher, and the upper bulb is the park‐
ing lamp.
4. Pull off the bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Xenon headlamps*
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps* and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Xenon headlamps*: Low beams
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 221.
These lamps are made using xenon technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Adaptive light control*
The parking lamps and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Please contact your service center in the event
of a malfunction.
Front fog lamps*
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 221.
Front fog lamps in vehicles equipped with adap‐
tive light control*: 55-watt bulb, H11
Front fog lamps without adaptive light control:
35-watt bulb, H8
Seite 223
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
1. Insert the screwdriver from the tool kit, with
the flat side facing outward, past the removal
hook and onto the clip, arrow 1.
2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.
3. Press the removal hook upward, arrow, and
remove the front fog lamp from the front us‐
ing the hook.
4. Detach the connector.
5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb and replace it.
7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front
fog lamp. Note the guide rails in doing so.
Turn signal
The turn signals are located next to each low
beam in the engine compartment.
21-watt bulb, PY 21W
1. Open the hood, refer to page 215.
2. Unscrew the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move it carefully.
The bulb is attached to the cap.
3. Turn the bulb clockwise to remove it.
4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Lateral turn signals
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 221.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Please contact your service center in the event
of a malfunction.
Seite 224
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Replacing components
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal
2 Backup lamp
3 Brake light
4 Tail lamp*
5 Tail lamp/brake light
Adaptive light control* or xenon
headlamps*: Tail lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 221.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Halogen headlamps: Turn signal, tail
lamp and brake lamp
21-watt bulb, P21W
1.
Open the tailgate.
2. Insert the screwdriver from the tool kit be‐
tween the cover and body, push it up, arrow,
and remove the cover.
3. Release the nuts.
4. Remove the tail lamp from the body and de‐
tach the connector.
5. Detach the bulb holder from the tail lamp.
The turn signal is the upper bulb and the tail
lamp/brake lamp is the lower bulb on the
bulb holder.
6. Turn the bulb and remove it.
7. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Ensure that the bulb holder is firmly at‐
tached.
Backup lamp and brake force display
Backup lamp: 16-watt bulb, W16W
Brake force display: 21-watt bulb, H21W
Seite 225
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip, ar‐
row.
3. Detach the connector.
4. Detach the bulb holder from the tail lamp.
The backup lamp is the upper lamp and the
brake force display is the lower lamp on the
bulb holder.
5. To replace the backup lamp, pull off the bulb
carefully.
To replace the brake lamp, push the bulb
down and turn it to the left.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Ensure that the bulb holder is firmly at‐
tached.
Changing wheels
Notes
The vehicle equipment does not include a spare
tire.
When using run-flat tires* or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in the
event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Lug bolt lock*
The lug bolt lock is in the tool kit or in a storage
compartment close to the tool kit.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Removing
1.
Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt
back on.
Seite 226
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Replacing components
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only.
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
terminals, refer to page 230, in the engine com‐
partment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: save again.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the cargo area.
In the glove compartment
Swing the cover down, arrow.
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim and remove
the sound insulation.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 227
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Breakdown assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Emergency Request*
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup‐
ported by BMW Assist.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.◀
Service contract
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
tablished.
After the Emergency Request arrives at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
Assist Response Center contacts you and
takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Seite 228
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Breakdown assistance
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located behind the left-
hand cover in the cargo area.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First aid kit*
The first aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the cargo area.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any items promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
The Roadside Assistance phone numbers can
be found in the Contact brochure.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 196
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a
connection to Roadside Assistance* can be es‐
tablished directly.
Jump starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa‐
tion can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Seite 229
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
hicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Automatic transmission*: transporting
your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the event
of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Seite 230
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Breakdown assistance
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be
possible to control vehicle response.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐
nering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is stored in the tool
kit behind the left folding cover in the cargo area.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the arrow
symbol.
Seite 231
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Front
Rear
Tow-starting
Automatic transmission*
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Seite 232
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Breakdown assistance
Care
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/
60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control*, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/
30 cm.◀
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
hicle.
Washing in automatic car washes
Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car
washes right from the start.
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Notes
Note the following:
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor*, refer to
page 63, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system*. Follow the instructions on
avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
page 43.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll when the following
steps are taken:
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission/Sport automatic trans‐
mission*:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake, refer to page 60,
or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 61.
4. Switch the engine off.
Transmission position P with the igni‐
tion off
When the ignition is switched off, position P
is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐
matic car wash, for example, ensure that the
ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N.
A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
lock the vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
Seite 233
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention.
Environmental influences can act on the vehicle
paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car
care to these influences.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Chrome surfaces*
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Seite 234
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Care
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts*
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic
cleanser, if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Floor carpets and floor mats*
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with a microfiber cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 235
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Technical data
Dimensions
Width without mirrors, height
1 Vehicle width without mirrors: 74 inches/
1,881 mm
2 Vehicle height: 66 inches/1,675 mm
Seite 238
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Technical data
Length, wheel base
1 Wheel base: 110.6 inches/2,810 mm
2 Vehicle length: 182.7 inches/4,642 mm
Smallest turning circle
Ø: 39 ft/11.9 m
Engine specifications
The rated power outputs are established on the
basis of fuel grade AKI 91.
X3 xDrive 28i
Displacement cu in/cm³ 182.8/2,996
No. of cylinders 6
Maximum output
at engine speed
hp
rpm
241
6,600
Maximum torque
at engine speed
lb ft/Nm
rpm
221/300
2,750–4,000
Seite 240
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Technical data
X3 xDrive 35i
Displacement cu in/cm³ 181.7/2,979
No. of cylinders 6
Maximum output
at engine speed
hp
rpm
300
5,800
Maximum torque
at engine speed
lb ft/Nm
rpm
295/400
1,300–5,000
Weights
X3 xDrive 28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,136/2,330
Load lbs/kg 903/410
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,832/1,285
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 19.4–56.5/550–1,600
X3 xDrive 35i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,213/2,365
Load lbs/kg 903/410
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,447/1,110
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,843/1,290
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 19.4–56.5/550–1,600
Seite 241
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Short commands of the voice activation
system*
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Info display of the instrument cluster. ›Info Display‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Open the profiles. ›Profiles‹
Equipment*
Function Command
Open the air conditioning settings. ›Climate‹
Open the Head-up Display. ›head up display‹
Seite 243
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Vehicle information
Owner's Manual
Function Command
Open the Owner's Manual. ›Display Owner's Manual‹
Open the Quick Reference Guide. ›Quick reference‹
Open the index. ›Owner's Manual‹
Open the search by pictures. ›Search by pictures‹
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation*
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Seite 244
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Short commands of the voice activation system
Function Command
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale 100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map scale 5 kilo‐
meters
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale 5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
Seite 245
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Function Command
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of travel‹
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split screen scale
100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split screen
scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g., 93.5 megahertz
or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Seite 246
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Short commands of the voice activation system
Function Command
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., frequency 753 or
753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Weather Band
Function Command
Open the Weather Band. ›Weather band‹
Switch on the Weather Band. ›Weather band on‹
Select a Weather Band station. ›Select a weather channel‹
Satellite radio*
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite radio channel
2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
Seite 247
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
CD/Multimedia*
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
or
›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g. DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split
screen.
›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
AUX at front. ›AUX front‹
Seite 248
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Short commands of the voice activation system
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone*
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office*
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
Seite 249
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Contacts*
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
BMW Assist*
Function Command
Open BMW Assist. ›B M W Assist‹
Open BMW Search. ›B M W Search‹
Open the Internet. ›Internet‹
Seite 250
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Short commands of the voice activation system
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 86
Activated-charcoal filter 105
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 85
Adaptive light control 77
Adaptive light control, bulb re‐
placement 223
Additional telephone 176
Additives, oil 217
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 47
After washing vehicle 234
Airbags 80
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 102, 104
Air distribution,
manual 101, 103
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 102, 105
Air pressure, tires 207
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 106
Air volume, automatic climate
control 101, 104
Alarm system 42
Alarm, unintentional 43
All around the center con‐
sole 17
All around the headliner 18
All around the steering
wheel 12
ALL program, automatic cli‐
mate control 105
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 213
All-wheel-drive 87
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 108
Alternative oil types 218
AM/FM station 148
Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc‐
tions 137
Antifreeze, washer fluid 64
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 86
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 86
Appointments 189
Approved engine oils 217
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 114
Arrival time 71
Assist 195
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 229
Audio playback 155
Audio playback, Blue‐
tooth 169
AUTO intensity 104
Automatic car wash 233
Automatic climate con‐
trol 101
Automatic climate control with
enhanced features 103
Automatic Curb Monitor 53
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 81
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 77
Automatic Hold 60
Automatic locking 38
Automatic recirculated-air
control 104
Automatic tailgate 40
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 104
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 101
AUTO program, intensity 104
AUX-IN port 166
Average fuel consumption 70
Average speed 70
Axle loads, weights 241
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 49
Backrest, seats 47
Backrest, width 49
Backup camera 95
Balance 146
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 229
Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 231
Bass 146
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 227
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 32
Battery, vehicle 227
Before entering the car
wash 233
Belts, safety belts 50
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 115
Blinds, sun protection 44
Bluetooth audio 169
Bluetooth connection, activat‐
ing/deactivating 177
BMW Assist 195
BMW EfficientDynamics, refer
to Saving fuel 124
BMW homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem 219
BMW Search 197
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 115
Brake assistant 86
Brake discs, breaking in 120
Seite 252
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Everything from A to Z
Brake force display 85
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 85
Brake lights, adaptive 85
Brake pads, breaking in 120
Braking, notes 121
Breakdown assis‐
tance 228, 229
Breaking in 120
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 73
Bulb replacement 221
Bulb replacement, front 222
Bulb replacement, rear 225
Bulbs and lamps 221
Button, Start/Stop 58
C
Calendar 189
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, backup camera 97
Camera, care 235
Camera, Top View 99
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 115
Car battery 227
Car care products 234
Care, displays 235
Care, vehicle 234
Cargo 122
Cargo area 110
Cargo area, enlarg‐
ing 110, 111
Cargo area lid 39
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 116
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 123
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 32
Carpet, care 235
Car wash 233
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 120
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 219
CD/DVD 155
CDs, storing 162
Cell phone 176
Center armrest 114
Center console 17
Central locking system 35
Central screen, refer to Control
Display 19
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 6
Changing parts 221
Changing wheels/tires 212
Check Control 74
Children, seating position 55
Children, transporting
safely 55
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 55
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 56
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 55
Child-safety locks 57
Child seat, mounting 55
Child seats 55
Chrome parts, care 234
Cigarette lighter 108
Cleaning, displays 235
Climate control 101, 103
Clock 69
Closing/opening from in‐
side 38
Closing/opening via door
lock 38
Closing/opening with remote
control 36
Clothes hooks 115
Combination instrument 13
Combination instrument, elec‐
tronic displays 15
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 61
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 62
Comfort Access 41
Computer 70
Concierge service 196
Condensation on win‐
dows 102, 105
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 122
Condition Based Service
CBS 219
Confirmation signal 37
Contacts 185
Control Display 19
Control Display, settings 72
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 86
Convenient opening 36
Coolant 218
Cooling function 102, 105
Cooling, maximum 104
Cooling system 218
Corrosion on brake discs 122
Cruise control 91
Cruising range 67
Cupholder 115
Current fuel consumption 68
Current location, storing 130
Customer Relations 200
D
Damage, tires 211
Damping control, dynamic 88
Data, technical 238
Date 69
Daytime running lights 77
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 102, 105
Destination distance 70
Destination guidance 135
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 134
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 128
Digital clock 69
Digital radio 149
Dimensions 238
Dimmable mirrors 54
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 61
Displacement, engine 240
Seite 253
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Display in front windshield 99
Display, instrument cluster 67
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ment lighting 79
Displays 13
Displays, cleaning 235
Disposal, coolant 218
Disposal, vehicle battery 227
Distance control, refer to
PDC 93
Distance to destination 70
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 32
Downhill control 87
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 86
Driving instructions, breaking
in 120
Driving notes, general 120
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 86
Driving tips 120
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 86
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 86
DTMF suffix dialing 181
DVD/CD 155
DVD/CD notes 161
DVD changer 159
DVD settings 158
DVDs, storing 162
DVD, video 157
Dynamic Damping Control 88
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 141
Dynamic Driving Control 89
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 86
E
EfficientDynamics, refer to
Saving fuel 124
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 15
Electronic engine oil level
check 217
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 86
Emergency detection, remote
control 33
Emergency release, door
lock 38
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 204
Emergency Request 228
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 229
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 33
Energy Control 68
Energy recovery 68
Engine compartment 215
Engine compartment, working
in 215
Engine coolant 218
Engine oil 217
Engine oil, adding 217
Engine oil additives 217
Engine oil filler neck 217
Engine oil temperature 68
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 218
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 217
Engine specifications 240
Engine start, assistance 229
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 33
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 58
Engine stop 59
Engine temperature 68
Equalizer 146
Equipment, interior 107
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 86
Exchanging wheels/tires 212
Exhaust system 120
Exterior mirrors 53
External devices 166
External temperature dis‐
play 69
External temperature warn‐
ing 69
Eyes for securing cargo 123
F
Fader 146
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 74
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 43
Fan, refer to Air vol‐
ume 101, 104
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 74
Filler neck for engine oil 217
Fine wood, care 235
First aid kit 229
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow
fitting 231
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 82
Flat tire, warning lamp 83
Flat tire, wheel change 226
Flooding 121
Floor carpet, care 235
Floor mats, care 235
FM/AM station 148
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 64
Foot brake 121
Front airbags 80
Front fog lamps 79
Front fog lamps, front, bulb re‐
placement 223
Front lamps 222
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 81
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 82
Front seats, adjusting 47
Fuel cap 204
Fuel consumption, current 68
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 70
Seite 254
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Everything from A to Z
Fuel filler flap 204
Fuel gauge 67
Fuel quality 206
Fuel, tank capacity 242
Fuse 227
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 107
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 137
Gear change, automatic trans‐
mission 65
General driving notes 120
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 45
Glove compartment 114
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐
gation system 128
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 241
Gross weight, permissible for
trailer towing 241
H
Hand brake, refer to Parking
brake 59
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 108
Hazard warning flashers 228
HDC Hill Descent Control 87
HD Radio 149
Head airbags 80
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 77
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 76
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 36
Headlamp flasher 62
Headlamp flasher, bulb re‐
placement 223
Headlamp glass 222
Headlamps 222
Headlamps, care 234
Headlamp washer system 62
Headliner 18
Head restraints 47
Head restraints, front 51
Head restraints, rear 51
Head-up Display 99
Head-up Display, care 235
Heavy cargo, stowing 123
Height, seats 47
Height, vehicle 238
High-beam Assistant 78
High beams 62
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 78
High beams, bulb replace‐
ment 223
Hill Descent Control HDC 87
Hills 121
Holder for beverages 115
Homepage 6
Hood 215
Horn 12
Hot exhaust system 120
House number, entering for
navigation 129
Hydroplaning 121
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 69
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 69
Identification marks, tires 210
Identification number, refer to
Engine compartment 215
iDrive 19
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 32
Ignition off 58
Ignition on 58
Indication of a flat tire 83
Indicator and warning mes‐
sages 14
Indicator lamps 14
Individual air distribu‐
tion 101, 103
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 33
Inflation pressure, tires 207
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 70
Information on the navigation
data 142
Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 83
Instrument cluster 13, 67
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 15
Instrument lighting 79
Integrated key 32
Integrated universal remote
control 107
Intensity, AUTO program 104
Interactive map 132
Interior equipment 107
Interior lamps 79
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 36
Interior motion sensor 43
Interior rearview and exterior
mirrors, automatic dimming
feature 54
Interior rearview mirror 54
Intermediate destinations 134
Internet 198
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 129
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 73
iPod/iPhone 167
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 226
Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 226
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 65
Jump starting 229
K
Key/remote control 32
Seite 255
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 41
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 33
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 65
Knee airbag 80
L
Lamp replacement 221
Lamp replacement, front 222
Lamp replacement, rear 225
Lamps 76
Lamps and bulbs 221
Language on Control Dis‐
play 73
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 123
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 56
Leather, care 234
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 222
Length, vehicle 240
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 24
Light-alloy wheels, care 234
Light control 77
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 222
Lighting 76
Lighting via remote control 36
Light switch 76
Load 123
Loading 122
Lock, door 38
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 38
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 38
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 36
Locking, automatic 38
Locking, central 35
Locking via tailgate 39
Lock, power window 44
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 57
Low beams 76
Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam Assistant 78
Lower back support 49
Lug bolt lock 226
Luggage compartment roller
cover 110
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 124
Lumbar support 49
M
Maintenance 219
Maintenance require‐
ments 219
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 73
Maintenance system,
BMW 219
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 74
Manual air distribu‐
tion 101, 103
Manual air volume 101, 104
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 59
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 65
Manual operation, backup
camera 95
Manual operation, door
lock 38
Manual operation, exterior mir‐
rors 53
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 204
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 94
Manual operation, Top
View 98
Map, destination entry 132
Map in split screen 139
Map view 138
Marking on approved
tires 212
Marking, run-flat tires 213
Master key, refer to Remote
control 32
Maximum cooling 104
Maximum speed, winter
tires 213
Measure, units of 73
Medical kit 229
Memory, seat, mirror 52
Menu in instrument cluster 69
Menus, operating, iDrive 19
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 20
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 139
Messages 187
Microfilter 103, 105
Minimum tread, tires 211
Mirror 53
Mirror memory 52
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 121
Mobile phone 176
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 6
Moisture in headlamp 222
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 55
MP3 player 166
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12
Multimedia 155
Music collection 162
Music search 163
Music, storing 162
N
Navigation 128
Navigation data 142
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 51
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 51
New wheels and tires 212
Seite 256
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Everything from A to Z
NORMAL program, Dynamic
Driving Control 90
Notes 6, 191
Number of cylinders, en‐
gine 240
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 231
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 219
Obstacle marking, backup
camera 96
Odometer 68
Office 185
Oil 217
Oil, adding 217
Oil additives 217
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 73
Oil filler neck 217
Oil level check 217
Oil types, alternative 218
Oil types, approved 217
Old batteries, disposal 227
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 219
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 19
Opening/closing from in‐
side 38
Opening/closing via door
lock 38
Opening/closing with remote
control 36
Operating concept, iDrive 19
Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 104
P
Paint, vehicle 234
Pairing, mobile phone 176
Panic mode 36
Panoramic glass sunroof 45
Park Distance Control
PDC 93
Parked-car ventilation 106
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 122
Parking aid, refer to PDC 93
Parking brake 59
Parking lamps 76
Parking lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 223
Parking with Auto Hold 60
Partition net 112
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 53
Pathway lines, backup cam‐
era 96
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 93
Performance Control 87
Permissible axle load 241
Personal information 185
Personal Profile 33
Phone 176
Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 45
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 44
Plastic, care 235
Position, storing 130
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 128
Power failure 227
Power output, engine 240
Power windows 43
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 207
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 33
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 23
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 45
Protective function, win‐
dows 44
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 19
R
Radiator fluid 218
Radio 148
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 32
Radio ready state 58
Rain sensor 63
Random 156
Random playback 156
RDS 149
Reading out loud 192
Rear lamps 225
Rear socket 109
Rearview mirror 53
Rear window de‐
froster 102, 105
Recirculated-air filter 105
Recirculated-air
mode 102, 104
Recommended tire
brands 212
Refueling 204
Release tool 221
Remaining range 67
Reminders 191
Remote control/key 32
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 37
Remote control, universal 107
Remote inquiry 181
Replacement fuse 227
Replacing parts 221
Replacing wheels/tires 212
Reporting safety defects 8
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 67
Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 83
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 123
Retreaded tires 212
Roadside Assistance 196
Roadside parking lamps 77
Roller sunblinds 44
Roof load capacity 241
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 124
Rope for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 231
Route 136
Seite 257
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Route criteria, route 136
Route, displaying 136
Routes, avoiding 136
Route section, bypassing 137
RPM, engine 240
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 213
Rubber components,
care 235
Run-flat tires 213
S
Safe braking 121
Safety 6
Safety belt reminder 51
Safety belts 50
Safety belts, care 235
Safety switch, windows 44
Safety systems, airbags 80
Satellite radio 150
Saving fuel 124
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 139
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Screwdriver 221
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 231
Search, refer to BMW
Search 197
Seat and mirror memory 52
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 50
Seat heating, front 49
Seat heating, rear 50
Seating position for chil‐
dren 55
Seats 47
Selection list in instrument
cluster 69
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 65
Sensors, care 235
Service and warranty 7
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Serv‐
ice 219
Service requirements, dis‐
play 73
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 229
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 72
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 52
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 64
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 66
Short commands 243
Side airbags 80
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 37
Sitting safely 47
Size 238
Slide/tilt glass roof 45
Smallest turning circle 240
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 183
Snow chains 213
Socket 109
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 219
Software update 172
Spare fuse 227
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 131
Specified engine oil
types 217
Speed, average 70
Speed limit, setting 71
Speedometer 13
Split screen 23
Split screen map settings 139
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 137
SPORT+ program, Dynamic
Driving Control 89
Sport automatic transmis‐
sion 66
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 89
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 65
Sport steering, variable 88
Stability control systems 86
Start/Stop button 58
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 33
Starting assistance 229
Starting the engine 58
State/province, selecting for
navigation 128
Stations, stored 154
Station, storing 148
Status information, iDrive 22
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering wheel, adjusting 54
Steering wheel heating 54
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 64
Stopping the engine 59
Storage compartments 114
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 114
Storage, tires 213
Storing the vehicle 235
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 129
Summer tires, tread 211
Supplementary text mes‐
sages 75
Suspension settings 89
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 89
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 106
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 68
Tailgate 39
Tailgate, automatic 40
Tailgate via remote control 36
Tail lamps 225
Tasks 190
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 6
Seite 258
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Everything from A to Z
Technical data 238
TeleService 195
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 102, 104
Temperature display, external
temperature 69
Temperature, engine oil 68
Terminal, starting aid 230
Text messages 187
Text messages, supplemen‐
tary 75
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 42
Theft protection, lug
bolts 226
Theft protection, refer to Cen‐
tral locking system 35
Thigh support 49
Tilt alarm sensor 43
Tilt, seats 47
Time of arrival 71
Tire age 212
Tire damage 211
Tire identification marks 210
Tire inflation pressure 207
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 82
Tires, changing 212
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 207
Tires, run-flat tires 213
Tire tread 211
Toll roads, route 136
Tone 146
Tool kit 221
Tools 221
Top View 97
Torque, engine 240
Total vehicle weight 241
Tow fitting 231
Towing 230
Town/city, navigation 128
Tow-starting 230
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 82
Traction control 86
TRACTION program, Dynamic
Driving Control 87
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 139
Traffic situation/gray card 140
Transmission, automatic 64
Transporting children
safely 55
Tread, tires 211
Treble, tone 146
Trip computer 71
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 62
Trip odometer 68
Trunk cover 110
Trunk lid 39
Turning circle 240
Turning circle lines, backup
camera 96
Turn signals, operation 61
U
Unintentional alarm 43
Units of measure 73
Universal remote control 107
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 65
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 38
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 38
Unlocking/locking with remote
control 36
Upholstery care 234
USB audio interface 167
USB interface 114
V
Variable sport steering 88
Vehicle battery 227
Vehicle battery, replacing 227
Vehicle, breaking in 120
Vehicle care 234
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number
in the engine compart‐
ment 215
Vehicle jack 226
Vehicle paint 234
Vehicle storage 235
Vehicle wash 233
Ventilation 106
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 106
Version of the navigation
data 142
Video playback 157
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 243
Voice activation system 25
Volume, setting 146
W
Warning lamps 14
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 74
Warning triangle 229
Washer fluid 64
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 242
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 63
Washer system 62
Washing, vehicle 233
Water on roads 121
Weather Band 149
Weights 241
Welcome lamps 76
Wheel base, vehicle 240
Wheel change 226
Wheels, changing 212
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 207
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 82
Width, vehicle 238
Window defroster,
rear 102, 105
Windows, powered 43
Windshield washer fluid 64
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 63
Windshield washer system 62
Windshield wiper 62
Seite 259
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 64
Winter storage, care 235
Winter tires, suitable tires 213
Winter tires, tread 211
Wiper blades, replacing 221
Wiper fluid 64
Wiper system 62
Wood, care 235
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench 221
X
xDrive 87
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 223
Y
Your individual vehicle 6
Seite 260
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
Everything from A to Z
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 606 190 ue
*BL260619000C*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 190 - 12 10 500
